Home

2011 Dodge Avenger Owner`s Manual

1. 268 o Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped 269 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 271 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Of Indicator Light 4 ext 2 9 B Tire Safety Information 274 Tite Markings sus ete dedo Y 1 9 PERE 274 O Tire Identification Number TIN 278 D Tire Terminology And Definitions 279 B Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 280 NS TA TING AND OPERATING 243 W Tires General Information 284 AMG Pressure ina eco 3n ME OE ee HY bem S 284 O Tire Inflation Pressures 285 O Radial Ply dies ve sue aye 4 gen oye os 287 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped 288 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 288 O Full Size Spare 1f Equipped esu vs 289 oO Limited Use Spare If Equipped 289 EL Dre END sepite unnep RE EE HEES 290 O Tread Wear Indicators 291 Ellie He eie Hai 092493 23 2232234 291 E Replacement Dres 2 a cenar orbe e 292 W Tire Chains sou OES EE N NE OG 293 Snow Tires AE TE EE 293 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 294 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 295 HD se Oy lel Sarat Pues uo d Rm oe pesa stas 297 O Premium System If Equipped 299 O General Information N Fuel Requirements O Reformulated Gasoline 304 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 305 O E 85
2. 363 Pur COMCIMOMING uv vex ues exei eee a Tes 220 Air Conditioning Controls s co eret ER 227 Alr CondiUoning FIGE 2 uoa e spe CB 3 deos x 238 364 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 363 364 Air Conditioning System 227 231 363 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 299 Air Pressure Tires llle 285 Dur 2a Ve aon eae eee aes eee tA Ene ee 55 66 itbas Deployment ox 2d SEE MEE HERE 67 AirDap Light ouod 834449554 DiE EE Ed 65 70 84 151 Airbag Maintenance oi 522640444 teray EE ODE 69 ADAS Ide 24 4 44 5 4 ee hoe SKEER RR SN 59 63 66 Airbag Window Side Curtain 60 63 66 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 158 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 195 220 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 265 Anti Lock Warning Light uui o ge RD ER es 265 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant au acm mm yw 371 396 Di posdl osse ank saik a aa ae Bard OR Ree 373 APPEN E EMS aa tss e Once P DEE se a En 380 ELE A LLL 138 Auto Down Power Windows DD Auto Unlock Doors leen 32 Auto Up Power Windows suis Ra em dd RR ER 36 Automatic Dimming Mirror 92 Automatic Door Locks SS 31 32 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 156 171 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 231 N INDEX 427 Automatic Transaxle 12 246 250 377 Addin
3. Starting and Operating for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 289 Since this tire has limited tread life the original eguip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or
4. ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle Six Cylinder Engines the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When addi tional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If eng
5. Es Dre Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs a c Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 284 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 285 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always
6. additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory pr
7. 031508787 031508788 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Changing Wiper Speeds Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park low speed wiper operation or to the HI position for position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they high speed wiper operation are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving between cycles through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind Changing Intermittent Settings shield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay If the vehicle is moving les
8. 2444 2556 PGi eo RAD ER Gee ado bes 319 Minimum Requirements ues 3e 9 p eE 322 Trailer and Tongue Weight 26 9 321 Trailer Towing GUde sos oca oh teat eens RES 320 Trailer WIC perrete sh DEEL LEDE PP S EE 320 Dur MP TT 250 Automatic cele 12 246 250 377 PULOSUCK ea see RE TIT 256 Els OE EE EET m 380 bi ierdie based wut xam HEKS ER EES N 377 CperduOn sans bre RE Seah OASE HAS hae 250 Aai SEE ETE EEN 254 oelect on of LUBTICANT 22 xm SEED ea kee 398 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry oes see ERAS 25 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry uetus RS 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 124 ITAMSPOMING ACIS sairdir erita ded X HE De 82 Tread Wear Indicators wise 244264844444 29 ID Bee ROTASIE EA RSEN EUER S RES 163 Hi Odometer a ners ke tee ORO d REPE SORA 154 N INDEX 443 Trip Odometer Reset Button 0 157 Trunk Release Remote Control 38 Tr nk Release Emergency dueezaegonsa pane a ans 39 TOP Signals seas acer had prarepi 112 158 395 uconnect Hands Free Phone 95 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 148 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 423 Universal Transmitter lt usc ane v ware e reedi edes 124 Unleaded GasOune ses ace ando po oi edes 304 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt saai mi een 46 Upholstery Care teas sen vhs Gee ees bees a 384 Van MAMOlS eeu tes doe hee chee a kee a ple Variance COMPASS 3 scs D
9. 8 Engine Oil Fill N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap
10. Glovebox Storage Compartment 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Driver s Side Sunglass Holder If Equipped An integrated sunglass holder is located in the headliner above the sun visor To access the sunglass holder lower the sun visor Small items such as toll tickets can be stored between the two straps while sunglasses or other items can be stored above the two straps 030406039 Sunglass Holder Cargo Area The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 WARNING Continued Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down Place as much cargo as possible in f
11. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC dy m O REEDE IEE INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80
12. nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned
13. when the desired position is reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Release the switch when the desired position is reached WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt Continued 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited
14. 1 11 mm Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine with PZEV ZFR5AP Gap 0 031 in 0 8 mm Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 031 in 0 79 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane PZEV Partial Zero Emission Vehicle 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part e MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed Automatic Transmission ATF 4 product MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is Brake Master Cylinder not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake flu ids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans Power Steering Reservoir mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 400 O Required Maintenance Intervals 402 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspect
15. 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary not done at 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular
16. 2 Seatback N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat f 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607497 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement 022607757 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock NOTE into the back decora
17. Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 23 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped lights are on 24 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light i Each tire including the spare if provided Q inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog should be checked monthly when cold and placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the pro
18. Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition 5 malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 308 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can
19. DWHCH teeeeeeeeseoe ED OER VER EE ER 111 Heated Seale as ees sre HR BS ee ease ee 98 I org T 227 Lleatet Engine Block uas vds 3d RA 249 Hitches Trailer TOWING sie dct ueris he gor BE a 319 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 124 Hood Mi MP 109 IE GR Xs4wasessebbEPLS 4 ERAS AX S 3o d 12 KEY T 12 434 INDEX NEE Id lemon key Removal 24442408 644462655 HR 12 Mate POY sereset petak ORES oe ea 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key sedes Rack 35 OER A sc 14 Infant Restraint su su she e dee awe oes 7172 73 Information Center Vehicle 168 Inside Rearview Mirror 0000005 91 Instrument Cluster i e usa ep Ea we eS MEE 150 Instrument Panel and Controls 148 Instrument Panel Cover 384 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 385 Integrated Power Module Fuses 386 Interior Appearance Care issus 384 liter or Lights uos scs urs DR ae DAE cae eae os 115 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 118 Introduction us op eGeheneeeees aceon HEES 4 Jack Location iese Ge a eee oe seed ee Gas 992 Jack OPETI a vore BARE der d ode d ER 332 334 Jacking INSUMCHONS acci ded idet BREED ee 334 JG IANS sae heesebeae EE TEG 339 Key lie Reminder 223 22 93 9 beets eee es ae 14 kes LEOPTEODIDUITIE ten ue dox ur ER Ke HER EER DE 16 Key Replace en usi ska e pu ESE EED RED v 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 4 scars o ees ee neh andes 14 Keyless Entry System uo
20. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 320 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings a Max GTW Max Trailer Tongue Wt Engine Transmission Max Frontal Area Gross Trailer Wt See Note 1 2 AL Auto 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 3 6L Auto 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 900 kg 200 lbs 90 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Note 2 Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields guards are not recommended for use with all four cylinder engines with automatic transmission Please see your authorized dealer for additional infor
21. WARNINCG Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on WARNING Continued e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic locations other than those indicated in the Jacking e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are Instructions for this vehicle securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground NOTE Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of Tires General Information for information about the spare tire its use and operation epe 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left 2 to loosen th
22. and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supporte
23. crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine runn
24. engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press and release the DOWN button to advance the display through the Trip Functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate in the EVIC display This ECO message will appear when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy
25. finish Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other
26. intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If its sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and sd then turn the air t TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 oS the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near sd If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and d In very cold weather pim if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 0
27. it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected 258 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop NS TA TING AND OPER
28. kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine IF EQUIPPED running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into E 85 General Information the vehicle The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 309 the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and ALOM gasoline only powered vehicles Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 81ae46ab 81ae46a9 E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge 310 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury
29. n ER WK RE eae ea EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfa
30. new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of a battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m x2 NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the foll
31. the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 The instrument panel power outlet located below the A second power outlet is located inside the center con climate control knobs has power available only when the sole ignition is ON This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position y 035233080 Center Console The center console power outlet is powered directly from 2 the battery power available at all times Items plugged Instrument Panel Power Outlet into this power outlet may discharge the batter
32. until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer Reset button to turn off the message If the problem 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap I the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolv ing the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not
33. 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle h
34. Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar then shut down 10 seconds later N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 e For security power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e Fuel lamp turns on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of PARK e The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK but
35. Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EGUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel Q y I ON OFF CANCEL 032209541 2 RES 3 SET 1 ON OFF 4 CANCEL NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system OFF wh
36. Calibration sasies een 167 174 Compass Variance usa due LA HERRERA 165 174 Computer Iup Duavel 222252999 9x s 20 171 Console 64 355 4 oe 6b Se ee oS ee 108 142 Console Floor ss sib dba E RO eae Se 108 142 N INDEX 429 Contract Service uou uem d xo WRES SES 419 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 372 COO y EE suis agas 6 E EERE 370 Adding Coolant Antifreeze o4 Coolant Capacity 44 364 vq ucb xai ah ages 396 Coolant Level eren 370 373 Disposal of Used Coolant 9 9 Drain Flush and Refill 370 esse MERS AE NE verni ees 372 Points to Remember SS SS SS 374 Presse Wap vae erep fo he sq DR ES 372 Radiator Cap sisis ees oe teres iaiia 372 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 971 396 997 Corrosion Protection 000 00 eee 380 Crankcase Ventilation Module 20 Bu AE 3 23 279 058 ved ba ee eee ed 157 CCUDBOILdSES assets dh dex d OER ES RE 108 138 386 Customer Assistance SS 417 Customer Programmable Features 176 Data Recorder Event 2 222 RE See Es 70 Daytime Running Lights 4 aea EES RO REKE 04 E 114 Detlef OEIC sprer epas adie WU ERU DES an 355 Defroster Rear Window ea 144 Defroster Windshield 85 229 235 Delay Intermittent Wipers 30 118 Diagnostic System Onboard 959 Dimmer Switch Headlight LLL 115 Dipsticks Automa
37. Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo ll Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV MP3 WMA AUX Jacks ss ida acie Rs 178 IBGUIDDOU ewe rete rego 4 Kl SEM PRU ad 198 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 179 O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped ssi run 198 D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 187 D Operating Instructions TM 1 3 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 189 EE Mi EK de aise Button ll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES 199 Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 192 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 199 O Info Button D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 192 And NES die Play esise isie a oye ean AE 202 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio O Notes On Playing MP3 Files 204 If Equipped ee ee ee EE EE eee 124 O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 207 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio D Left Hand Switch Functions For Radio Sales Code RES RSC 000005 207 CODOER UUR 4 644 Gos eee dep HPP End OE dr M zd 225 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 208 B Left Hand Switch Functions For Media 5 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD ie CD Operon spes ssie bro ar os ded s 225 Amd MP3 Audio Play i s eed rore sce 213 W CD DVD Disc Mai
38. ER TE EE ease 84 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 4 22 pre DRR ER A7 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 47 And Pregnant Women sesse eser SE cea sees DD Child Restraint ve is cet x 3 RR Oe ee 71 80 Ins saarn or oe ELON Hoe tenuate as 55 DEO bed ec xsaraduenA Ex ee be eee ee SS 41 43 INSPEC NOn ce qz d d des thti Pub edd gs 84 Operating IDstruclONS rods ee Ve sEeE atv RE 43 ECtCNSIONCIS soc ok eset DES d v nee en ea 49 Rear Deal PP 41 ReMmmInGCt 54755 5465244 BE Se RED ERA 151 Untwistine Procedure 2 2 25 2x de m oa srpa 46 Seat Belts Sedan Seats Adjustment Cleaning Heated Lumbar Support 440 INDEX NEE Id ke ARIE AL 2929 22x 9 949555 OF 96 Sede Told sp verae gd EDE eae E 107 108 Rear Folding Sedan ud ana eee hee PS meis 140 Re le P 101 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 971 397 eloetion o CO 242246448 OOR EE whee ES REUS 358 sentry Key immobilizer s me moe 14 oetitry Key Programming uox wes uso vo very racs 16 Service Assistance l llle 417 Serv ce Cole su Eed Gee Sacs espe 29 do 419 Service Manuals osse 4 2 m SERE E S 9 iere 93 421 oeng DIR Clock eua sce ance as fo nn 180 200 209 Deist oek Sici sacs geh part oo ee a 176 Shift Lever Override 0000 eee eee 345 Shoulder Belts a2 3 93 ae Se EE EPI ES SE 4 ide AIPA 34555 6853 08 p P ERE HEESE oes DR 66 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 238 DIOTIAIS DUBIE soretes de Re
39. If Equipped TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User 4 Press the TIME button to change the display from Manual located on the DVD for further details elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES TM If Equipped RW FF Auxiliary Mode Refer to Video Entertainment System VES TM in the No function Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further SET Button Auxiliary Mode Belus No function Dolbye Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Dis DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service
40. If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system Operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor eee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 NOTE e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure e The T
41. Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the lire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lot
42. RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate ee 042305232 Media Center 130 RES UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN SEEK Butto
43. Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use the seat control switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat Use the seatback control to adjust the angle of the seatback Q Power Seat Switches 1 Seatback Control 2 Seat Control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will backward Push the seatback switch forward or rear move in the direction of the switch Release the switch ward the seat will move in the direction of the switch
44. Storage Bins The center console contains both an upper and lower storage bin Lifting a latch at the front of the hinged armrest provides access to these storage areas Dual Storage Console Latches 1 Top Compartment Latch 2 Bottom Compartment Latch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 The lower bin can be accessed directly without first exposing the upper bin by operating the right latch with the armrest down The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items The lower storage bin includes a molded in coin holder room for CD s DVD s and a power outlet that allows a cellular phone to recharge while concealed NOTE e A notch in the side of the console base under the armrest will also allow use of cellular phone while still plugged into the power outlet and with the armrest latched down e The power outlet located inside the console can also energize the cigar lighter in the available Smoker s Package 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operati
45. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 LIGHTS Headlights and Parking Lights Multifunction Lever Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for The multifunction lever controls the operation of the i headlight operation parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031407548 Headlight Switch 031407547 Multifunction Lever 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent AUTO will activate the automatic headlight system 031407553 Headlight Switch With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on and turn off based on the surrounding light levels Headlight Time Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multi function lever must be rotated to the off position after the ignition switch is turned OFF Only the headlights will illuminate during this time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in
46. TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure 300 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings S The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended c
47. To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION
48. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home off
49. Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 305 AMMI HG ONSE ooie oo x meedasra ues i 306 o Materials Added To Fuel 244 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id O Fuel System Cautions 454446246 ba RE 907 Ma dii ucl ss 5 4 5545598 SONS RAD ORE 312 O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 308 O Fuel Piller Cap Gas Gap ss ecetenen eats p ll Flexible Fuel 3 6L Engine Only O Loose Filler Cap Message 314 ee EG 908 E Vehicle LOANS Eed PERSE 315 E d O Vehicle Certification Label 45 8E RR ER ts 315 D Ethanol Fuel E 85 EES SS SS ss 310 4 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 315 O Foel Reguirements 3 9 SP HY ea DE 310 4 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 315 Em ale arres O 316 ELE are ois es AO ee ED ee VAS 311 EE LE ide ie TE RE EN 311 N Trailer Towing SS es Se 316 Replacement Parts ee ee 312 O Common Towing Definitions 317 O Trailer Hiteh Classification ss osse Sa riss 919 O0 Maintenance o xu da 9 ETG EY EXES 312 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 245 O Trailer Towing Weights lll Recreational Towing Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 320 Behind Motorhome Ete is se 19 eae Hanes 327 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 321 o Towing This Vehicle Behind Mr Ee RE IE N ON 399 te ale oe si el EE eee ees Ane a 927 TIOWING HIPS s dicas dup EE DEE acd dod ae 326 246 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the
50. a a3 Sor KEER SEERDE 327 Reformulated Gasoline EES ESE 304 Reise ai ER EES AE AE MENEER ELE 364 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 000 53 54 Remote Control Door Locks o oa Adin ae wach DERE SAKE ES Ree 20 een i AGW esee eee v BEES ond DU HE E PR 17 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 20 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 224 Remote Starting System ie AR He RR RE ED ADS 27 Remote Trunk Release lesen 38 Replacement Bulbs x 4 issie p e em REG 392 Replacement Keys Saee cu oh oe HESSIE EE 16 Replacement PariS sayeacceceegaee cee ayes 4 355 N INDEX 439 Replacement Wiles 46 bsatosesaue RES E PR Ss 292 Reporting Safety Deleel sages eb regionis 420 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 156 171 Restraint Head eee 104 Restraints Child 2h cake shee ci ban READ HE 71 Restraints Infant sisie eoe KOR SE KERR SE a 72 Rotation Tires sis 3 45 ER fub Wd RD AR oO id 294 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 22 aeg we rs 84 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 86 pater Defects Reporting vise DERE GADE EP en 420 Safety Information HIE 2 ca20460h4e40 E 274 Balch IDS gmaeite Dm 83 Safety Exhaust Gas x42 974 93 949 9E SERS SR 83 Satellite Radio Antenna 195 220 Schedule Maintenance leen 400 beat Belt Maintenance issues ke Ee vd RE Bed 385 Seat Belt Reminder 53 54 side MAS
51. an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id radio system in your veh
52. attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
53. beyond that afforded by the capability during emergency braking maneuvers The condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the system detects an emergency braking situation by sens traction afforded ing the rate and amount of brake application and then The BAS cannot prevent collisions including applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help those resulting from excessive speed in turns reduce braking distances The BAS complements the following another vehicle too closely or hydro Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very planing quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others NS TA TING AND OPERATING 269 Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation HSA will acti
54. braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed EE C E ce 055707139 Tire Rotation NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 295 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 11 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
55. children They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with H 035107277 J cupholders 2 Folding Rear Seat Armrest N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Lift the secondary latch located under the front edge To open the hood two latches must be released of the hood near the center and raise the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 031337036 Y Hood Safety Catch SUS 031307190 Hood Release Lever 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open CAUTION position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the left underside of the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death um Hood Prop Rod Hole Location Before closing the hood make sure to stow the prop rod in its proper location N UNDERSTANDING
56. disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Manual Heating and Air Conditioning Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced t
57. e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is
58. ee D Automatic Transmission D Appearance Care And Protection From CONDOSIDIE aoe eo bane uy ese ete HR DEER eee O Cleaning Center Console Cupholders N Fuses o Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM ll Vehicle Storage 367 370 375 377 380 386 386 367 W Replacement Bulbs 392 W Bulb Replacement esum emm t 992 Peale aeos sce o drca a RE Mot RE OP Co amp 992 DO kap ao tae Pere cha p bees a Ee a dd 394 O Backup Lampi ue aee gus dae ot PUE E e 395 O License Plate Lamp lt 2 4 exse eee n 396 la Fluid Capacities 0 396 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 397 BEE UIE P m 397 ADAS C 398 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 9 Q o d te 6 070310711 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 3 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Integrated Power Module Fuses 11 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Power Distribution Center Fuses 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses Q 5 5 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick
59. filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replen ishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly Fluid Level Check 3 6L Engine The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only Transmission Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will Washing have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva The following maintenance recommend
60. if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Heated Seats If Eduipped There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the climate con trols You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will WARNING Continued provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the Do not place anything on the seat that insulates normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected against heat such as a blanket or cushion This the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting ME maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that seat that has been overheated could cause serious time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two b
61. if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by th
62. if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level Four Cylinder Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the
63. illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed 12 Tachometer The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 14 Odometer Display Trip Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading befo
64. in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TU
65. in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 330 B8 If Your Engine Overheats 330 O Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped 331 Bl Jacking And Tire Changing 332 O Jack Location sires are yesss rriar 332 OSpare ire StOWage aucem ed eR REK DR 332 O Preparations For Jacking 333 O Jacking Instructions 3 aao x aco s vous 334 MJump Starting EE ee ee O Preparations For Jump Start B Jump Starting Procedure Wi Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Shift Lever Override N Towing A Disabled Vehicle D Without The Ignition Key 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis
66. is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing thi
67. jump starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap 2 Remote Negative Post WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post To remove the cover press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover Locking Tab 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Fai
68. knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags provide en front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out the right airbag board side of the front seats 022632697 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact sid
69. manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 420 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle h
70. mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 CAUTION Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause severe engine damage under extreme condi tions Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 322 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the Towing Requirements trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive factory installed options or authorized dealer installed train components the following guidelines are recom options must be considered as part of the total load on mended your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety In
71. mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to Always make sure that floor mats are properly feel the air directed against the windshield See your attached to the floor mat fasteners authorized dealer for service if your defroster is Never place or install floor mats or other floor inoperable coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Continued Continued 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehic
72. not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compre
73. of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as 290 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id your original equipment tire replace or repair the Tire Spinning original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud sand snow or icy conditions do not first opportunity spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without WARNING stopping Limited use spares are for emergency use only In Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle Emergencies for further information handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning whe
74. on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 282 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amoun
75. operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below OF 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation 312 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol
76. operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the four speed automatic transmission fluid level before towing The AutoStick six speed trans mission is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked See your authorized dealership service center for assistance Electronic Speed Control If Equipped e Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed A STARTING AND OPERATING 327 e Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to RECREATIONAL TOWING maximize fuel efficiency BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Cooling System Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle To reduce potential for engine and transmission over Recreational towing is not allowed heating take the following actions When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drive mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed train will result e Highway Driving Reduce speed NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground e Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily CAUTION Towing this vehicle
77. rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN
78. restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child re
79. the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not curre
80. the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com pares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Operating Modes All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situa tions ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below 272 STARTING AND OPERATING Partial ESC Mode This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the heater air conditioning controls When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally with the exception of engine power reduction This mode is intended to be used if t
81. to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045607541 Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side el window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button i
82. tors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that 266 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id service is reguired However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remain on the Anti Lock Brake ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required See your authorized dealer When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road
83. trip odom eter Dual Trip Odometer If Equipped Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it a second time to change the display to Trip B Press and release it a third time to change the display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approximately two seconds until the display resets to 0 miles km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer 17 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Indicator Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing however see your autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immediate service is required The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on approximately 15 seconds as a bulb check This is normal If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 18 Po
84. unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light quA This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is tumed from the OFF to the ON RUN position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED The light does not show the guantity of oil in the engine This can be determined using the procedure shown in Maintaining Your Vehicle 10 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi we ton If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system BRAKE T
85. way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 sec onds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 249 CAUTION The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte To prevent
86. wear even if it occurs before 144 000 miles 234 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not reguired to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
87. wear even if it occurs before filter 128 000 miles 208 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 120 000 miles 195 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Change the automatic transmission fluid damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular
88. while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 Spare Tire Removal Preparations For Jacking Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 6 060533067 3 Set the parking brake Spare Tire and Jack Stowage 4 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or REVERSE manual transmission 5 Turn OFF the ignition 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel EH us ri ki Tt Uo uam TERT i LH 4 i l i Magi yf a suat re Emu OW me m ee P NONE NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions
89. windshield can be guickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Mix mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging be comes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle win dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service
90. your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Reset Auto Up Anytime the vehicle battery goes dead the Auto Up function will be disabled To reactivate the Auto Up feature pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCK button To enable the window controls press the window control button again THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 021936672 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK RELEASE Use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to open the trunk from outside the vehicle From inside the vehicl
91. 403 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires ro
92. 45606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS aM Starting Procedures uuu emos RED xa m 246 W Automatic Transmission 250 O Automatic Transmission i424 22 ES 246 O Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock ANormal State wy omar Sack HOU do oe 246 Systems ouka EE EE EE een nnn nl a Exireme Cold Weather O Key Ignition Park Interlock 3n Below 20 F Or 7 C Lucem beers Hee ees 247 O Brake Transmission Interlock System 252 ja ik Engine Fails TO UIL vegan ave een d 29 px 247 D Four Speed Six Speed Automatic lier Slate oo ov ea ie ee RIG oa eae 249 dans ES te EPPS oase ae El Gear Ranges EFC 252 N Engine Block Heater If Equipped 249 242 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id W AutoStick If Equipped 256 HOPE od Misawa seen ona te ee ea AS 256 O General Information 2a cw 0422 o x 257 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces 258 DACCI ON uos ues 66 ER E 258 O O eea a a POR eS RS EER 3 258 N Driving Through Water 259 A Flowine Rising Water so EER PR EERS 259 O Shallow Standing Water 259 W Power Steering 00 004 261 O Power Steering Fluid Check 262 Mi Parking Brake ME per aberegeaeed 262 W Anti Lock Brake System ABS 265 N Electronic Brake Control System 267 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 267 B Traction Control System TCS 267 B Brake Assist System BAS
93. 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press the SELECT button until OFE 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the EVIC this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units In The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate eel efa df yf SA Ce Il OM 5 DISC MT WHA 042005200 Media Center 230 REQ Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in eit
94. AINING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Amp Lt Blue 19 20 Amp Yel Audio Amplifier low If Equipped r 15 Amp Lt Ce ee 20 21 10 Amp Red gt ien T 2 Equipped Ignition Run Climate 2 10 Amp Red Controls Hot Cupholder If Equipped 23 15 Amp Lt Auto Shutdown Blue ASD Relay 3 25 Amp pe Nr Sunroof If Radiator Fan Rela Cigar Lighter Sunroof If Equipped Control Module SCM Auto Shutdown ASD Rela Equipped Ignition Run Heated Mirrors If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 15 Amp Lt Auto Shutdown Ignition Run ASD Relay 2 30 a m i I Heated Seats If Ignition Run Equipped Occupant Classi Headlamp fication Module al 10 Amp Red Washer If 10 Amp Red OCM Equipped Occupant Re 30 Amp Auto Shutdown straint Controller 92 Pink ASD Relay 1 B n Switch Bank 28 Ignition Run Diagnostic Link Occupant Classi Connector fication Module 33 10 Amp Red Powertrain Con 10 Amp Red OCM trol Module Occupant Re PCM straint Controller ORC Hot Car No Fuse Required 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE pue E Anti Lock Brakes Passenger Door ABS Module 36 30 Amp Module PDM If Equipped Pink Driver Door Electronic Stabil Module DDM ity Control ESC 37 25 Amp Power Top Mod Module If Natural ule If Equipped Equipped ABS Module If Equipped Electronic Stabil ity Control ESC Module If Equi
95. AL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision DRIVE Six Speed Transmission This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However use the AutoStick mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent transmission shifting occurs in the DRIVE range For example When operating the vehicle under heavy load ing conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong headwinds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate gear in AutoStick will improve the performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up DRIVE Four Speed Transmission This range should be used for most city and highway driving it provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong headwinds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 3 range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up NS TA TING AND OPER
96. ATING 255 DRIVE 3 Four Speed Transmission This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear The trans mission will operate normally in first and second gear Shifts into third may be delayed to provide second gear operation at higher speeds The 3 range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up LOW Four Speed Transmission This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections CAUTION If the transmission operating temperature exceeds acceptable limits the vehicle computer may override the manually selected gear position by changing shift points This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating Reset Mode Electronic Transmission The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into sec ond gear third gear for six speed automatic The trans mission remains in second gear third gear with a six speed automatic despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Th
97. ATING 259 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will reguire extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued 260 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s driv
98. Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim
99. Always be sure PEL ENE ep ae Gap that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left rear patible parts quarter panel of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this CAUTION vehicle Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability Fuel Filler Door NS TA TING AND OPERATING 313 After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable NOTE If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s surface CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Tether Cable 314 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank
100. Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Voice Command System No function If Equipped ed For the radio Refer to Voice Command in the SIES EE N Made Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further A details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone
101. Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or riding in these areas are more likely to be seri out of the area ously injured or killed E If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Do not allow people to ride in any area of your running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound o
102. ICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained techni
103. Interior Lights 115 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 116 O Intermittent Wiper Systemi vesc ke ess 118 o Windshield Washers issu 119 xA dos ii m 120 o Headlights With Wipers Feature Available With Automatic Headlights Only 120 B Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 121 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped El od EMS TT B To Set A Desired Speed PUIG CGC Vale ave Su pte oh ee bye SS BIO Resume Speed ss 2 28 dre EE 6844454 o To Vary The Speed Setting ss 9 DER H To Accelerate For Passing ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped O Programming HomeLink H Gate Operator Canadian Programming H Using HomeLink H Reprogramming A Single Hotel ik Button as soeur pred t 122 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped El een 5 2555 KERSE REDE DT 130 O Troubleshooting TIPE vos aa acest 2 8 es ee ae DE 130 O General Information D Opening Sunroof Express D Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 132 B Closing Sunroof Express 133 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 133 A Pinch Protect Feature ex asa seiiet 133 O Venting Sunroof Express 133 O Sunshade Operation 199 Eed Dutellus sonde ae ERA tee a TES 134 O Sunroof Maintenance sese ir mines 134 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id b lonition Oit Operat
104. It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air con
105. NE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently b
106. NTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacture
107. Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles
108. OCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In lgnition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE e The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position e With either front door open and the key in the ignition neither the power door locks nor Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will function Locking Doors With A Key There is only one external doo
109. OG DOOR TNRUMKIDECK AM CONDITOMING CHILD BEAT RELEA E TETHER AM UH A n amp ls LOWER ANCHERTES ARRAS SUDNI DOOR LIGHTER ANO TETHER FOR CHILDREN LATCH FABBSENGER COAMVENTELE AIRBAG OFF TU oO Doy TOP UF CDOWMVEWTIBLE anew DONE Sy Amul Y CONTROL ESP BAS ELECTROMSE STAURLITT bg rc be PROGRAM RARE pond SYSTEM TIRE i gi Ie ul MONITI ELECTRONIC ALL ae FALIE OF ANT LOCH BRAKING STSTEM KA AWD BRAKE ELECTRONIC i BRAKE SYSTEM THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARMING PARE IG CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE TOW im HAUL VOICE HECDOGNITION Veh irn TOW VAAL tumay 4 JQ iw UEOMNEGT HALANG FOUR WHEEL AUTTOM ORTE LIDA Re PUSH di KEE OWNERS AIR ELE ETEOMEE MANUAL EO CONDITIONER TEE DP 01 0533317 INTRODUCTION 5 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on engraved on the front right door sill under door sill moulding and on the vehicle registration or title Ze Vehicle Identification Number Eed INTRODUC
110. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the
111. OTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchor age If you are installing LATCH compatible child re straints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEF
112. PMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire the tire fail dition ailure or condition Base System e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless while adjusting your tire pressure technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire cau e wing on a BE PERD i i Canses wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire AE DEE EE 5 tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the stopping ability tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte and to maintain the proper pressure nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Monitoring Telltale Light e Receiver Module e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 298 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Pressure Monitoring Low
113. R Accessories SS 355 420 MIBE ETBE 4 2460 Rob 64 23 R 645546 pkr 305 New Vehicle Break In Period 82 Occupant Restraints 4a d bua 460 paws oe us 63 67 Occupant Restraints Sedan 40 59 60 63 66 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 52359 ccwr ads 304 Odometer 22444 BROER Se Has eds HAARD 154 N INDEX 437 D T HE EE EET ER ote 154 157 OU Chance Indicator 4246444 dotar EE RPO 156 171 Oil Change Indicator Reset 156 171 Oil Filtet COSS uoa sees MERE RE RUP SUE rh RE s 360 Oil Filter Selection 13x 4 0 a mor urba ted XU Suns 360 Oil Pressure Licht osse d PUE Sos adr gs 152 OILEDoMI oa sane ihe on Oe eon S ARD RAK 357 397 Ody tc actceeet gb tee C ENT E 396 Change Interval s v score nri ata aep x s 156 171 358 leek oase ARE AES SOROR AR ae edes 257 pnr PT EE OT ER ER TES 307 Disposal Enn 360 c M 360 397 Filter Disposal outa duos A E ERROR CR ees 360 Identification LOGO su de ia rra as 358 Materials Added to ss au v dodo REUS HE EE 360 Recommendation 358 396 DUIS X399 9 2 PR ESPERE HAS SRI TE 260 sei AE ORE EE e d 399 396 Onboard Diagnostic System 353 354 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 124 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 ou 6 494464 eee AAR Bee RES KOR GA 254 Over necting Ep ie ser ske RD Velez a d ER es 330 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4421 Paint Care is sonus 4heh wee EET tas
114. S This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfab line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality E STARTING AND OPERATING 305 The manufacturer supports the use of reformulat
115. S OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following reading lights two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device Power Sunroof Switch e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof N
116. TION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS N Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 Hlenition Key Removal si aa dn 12 O Key In Ignition Reminder 14 O Locking Doors With A Key 14 NM Sentry GE EE N 14 El Replacement Keys 2 424 2c RT RSS RES HD 16 O Customer Key Programming 16 O General Information 222 c9 be page EE 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped o Rearming The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System B illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped D To Unlock The Doors D To Lock The Doors O To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id D Remote Open Window Feature Mm Power Windows 444222454 su tdor544 4523 34 n EE EE O Power Window Switches 4 5 5 4 6 45 co mes 34 o Using The Panic Alarm a s da e PAR exi 25 3 Auto Window Down If Equipped 35 O Programming Additional Transmitters 25 o Auto Window Up If Equipped 36 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 RD TR il Li rs N 97 O General Information cec sena sh eri EE Rs 26 5 Wind Buffeting isses 37 H Remote Start System If Equipped
117. UR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 020210511 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the D Ignition Switch Positions fi TOCK 3 ON RUN 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE e If you try to remove the key before you place the shift e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC the power window switches lever in PARK the key may become trapped tempo rarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inop erable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the L
118. VIC The EVIC consists of the following e System status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass heading display N 5 E W NE NW SE SW e Outside temperature display F or C e Trip computer functions e Audio mode displays 12 preset Radio Stations or CD Title and Track number when playing e Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS displays if equipped The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel switch bank located below the climate controls MENU MENU Button V DOWN Button Press and release the MENU button to advance the display to Trip Functions or Personal set tings or to return to the default System status display Press and release the DOWN button to advance the display through the various Trip Functions or Personal Settings UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 display the compass heading and the out Press and release the COMPASS button to side temperature COMPASS Button Press and release the SELECT Button to accept a selection The SELECT Button also resets various Trip Functions SELECT Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled e Left Front Turn Signal Li
119. VV Arne espre vais Sup vex ET OE 330 TOR SION ea serk eee Se 4 qose SER 86 395 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range soas ad ex dai dea vos PARE EDS 311 sur ON PPP SANI Fuel Regquiements subse S3 ees 308 310 Maintenance ees 912 Replacement Parts 42499 RES ERE Reda 312 ORUN ou esric ei eens RS PH PE E EE ES 311 Flooded Engine SEUNS ono Rr ERES ES 247 Floor Console 432 INDEX NEE Id Rigid Edele 2 626 a5 44263455 een EE ER hs 396 Plaid Leake uses 06844445 65 BESS RS RR HS 86 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 379 380 DINE Gece 29d cRGRa AO HAS AR S BU 375 398 Cool SVSIEM areracpardckug dq gaa dae sea ol 370 POOU uie aas ERA te DRAAK KS oes 357 Power GEENE eid e urb ch d VER DERE Di 262 398 PIGIOS RE ORE RE EE IE HON 397 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 397 FOC E NE EE N TEE Pares 114 159 394 Folding Kear Seal ss ag ees a Redde E se 107 108 liceo A tuek Velde ecu cea aay aes rening isa 344 Pile oes ee eee he oe eee ees 304 DoD A C 312 EE SAO reri ER EE EE ON 306 Clean Ait in Eko ORR Aa EE eee ee DEE 304 Ethanol AE SEE SOET OT EER EK OS 305 Piller Cap Gas Cap saec Seu ME trti 150 312 Filler Door Gas Cap 23 05 55 ive RE iani 150 COUN 44 Go EER bee BE aes Ree EAS 304 Co KT EE OE m 150 TIC pao eho seep OE aaa ae ete EET 151 Materials Added ss sca be ates Aga E SE a caput a 306 WICHMANN AE ON OE Soo eee ee eee ne EEN 305 Octane RIDE visa kis ertr
120. When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision collision CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes with adequate braking capacity Failure to do this could lead to Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size effort and longer stopping distances stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety 326 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working properly including hazard flashers Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range third gear for a four speed automatic and the fifth gear for a six speed AutoStick should be selected NOTE Using third or fifth instead of DRIVE while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous
121. a W Trunk Release SEE cee eee 38 0 How To Use Remote Start wasse ahy 6 4 4 27 B Trunk Safety Warning 00 000000 39 W Door Locks 2 0 0 0 ee eee 30 5 Trunk Internal Emergency Release 39 D Manual Door Locks ar Occupant Restraints ee 40 O Power Door Locks B H Lap Shoulder Belts 13 222 bk s xu dps 41 o Child Protection Door Lock System poor DONIS Sos enti RE OE EE NE 33 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 47 O Rear Seat Belts leen 48 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 D Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR D Advanced Front Airbag Features 58 If Equipped seen 45 O Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 63 O Energy Management Feature 24 5 4 0 ee 49 1 Event Data Recorder EDR 70 2 O Seat Belt Pretensioners 49 ME LLL N cove 71 O Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR 49 lBl Engine Break In Recommendations 82 S rerig e dd mM 53 M cdtely 10S Lus dea ke HE P dede d Ro eie ed 83 N ENE 54 O Transporting Passengers 12a er a 63 E E 55 HEDAU GAS 256 e464 ee ones oes BI AE 83 O Seat Belt Extender ss adm xu da 9993 DD EA Inside oa E Suppremental E Ee 55 oO Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make EE A ieee a ae ee Outside The Vehicle Ls 86 O Airbag System Components 57 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YO
122. a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas eee eee ee DIG Y 417 O Prepare For The Appointment 417 APrepare A List 44444 fevered ae ne ade cas 417 o Be Reasonable With Requests 417 N If You Need Assistance 417 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 418 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 418 Hn Medco Contactes sse x Ee AD RAS BOAS 418 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 419 H evee CONOCI 4 seada a unde se ee sees 419 Bl Warranty Information 420 E MOPAR Parts ose xd ee RE ei 420 N Reporting Safety Defects 420 O In The 50 United States And Washington iN OM EET OE OER ee O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire El lei Grades ws REDE emi e tus TT Res 423 Quality Grades P 423 oO Treadwear 4 owt oe eae Oe DES SES EE Y eee 423 Temperate Grades si sin thew ee ea tt 424 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERV
123. a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW Continued 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Continued e Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 3 GAWR Information in Starting and Operating for informa 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch tion on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection utilized This requirement may limit the ability to procedure always achieve 10 of trailer tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information Towing Requirement
124. ack features a work surface and a molded The recline handle on the front passenger seat also rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel releases the seatback to fold forward 030907276 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Seatback Adjustment 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This s
125. acks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 72 000 miles 117 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 80 000 miles 130 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if neces
126. ad e 24224459492 165 174 Vehicle Certification Label Ls 315 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading ses HE DERE PRE 281 315 316 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 VENCE GIOI SE sore ood ya eee eee KOS 297 991 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Viscosity Euelue ON cs ace aces xx Rack x Rondo nes 959 Voice Recognition System VR 0 95 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 150 Wamings and Ca tons 3 ex essor ven ee aagi vss 6 Warranty Information 2 5 46 65 aec dias Prot RE 420 Washer Addis PUJ s eurer 19 PB erropa DEER 367 Washers Windshield 116 119 367 Washing Velidele sisa fuo ar utes HI OUES HOER DE 381 Water Divine THROUGH asenacusceaucgas tanpi 259 Wheel and Wheel Trim less 383 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 383 Wind Dueling usi d armed SR EE EE 37 134 444 INDEX NEE Id Ddow OOS UR nox na ue RS RR DO RE SAGE RD 236 Windshield Wiper Blades 4 295 ERG EE S 366 go 652643604 KOPER PR EED ie 34 Windshield Wipers as ase on ai ER SR EORR RE 116 lg sus bape are OER KERR oo EA ee 34 Wiper Blade Replacement 366 Windshield Defroster 85229290 Wipers Intermittent as ees mam he oho N 118 Windshield Washers 116 119 Fd ARE AE AAR AT OE OR OE N ON 367 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations ar
127. ading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Trailer Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than or more than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers NS TA TING AND OPERATING 319 Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max
128. aint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat Make sure that e The child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown abo
129. all esra erences dko Ur soe vera NE 247 Flooded Starting erisir EER ELK RR BARE 247 Fuel Requirements sers atus o oon es 304 396 Jomp EENS ana eee eee eaten dene ea aes 339 Oil oase bd wena een RR do Pci hi PERS 357 396 397 Oil Change Interval 156 171 358 CULTIMIGP COD 63456555 tr SER den vU RSEN 351 359 Oil Filler ed ONA EE OR OT ES 360 Oil Filter Disposal pote bees Gene 09 360 N INDEX 431 Oil Selection 46463 4s444ae625 5 ome 358 396 EUPSUBIBOBE ooie epee eae GOES 360 COVEIDISQUBIE oe sai e Had d ap d oe ee EES HE 330 PIONS SEER EER OT OE a bese 246 Temperate alice sis se ER ee 4 vs 150 Engine Oil Viscosity soas go ioo S HR DRR cars 359 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 67 Entry System Illuminated 20 Ethanol RE EE OT EE OE EE TES Ves 305 Event Data Recorder a2 99 auc aan ER ao AE 70 Exhaust Gas Caution sos 3 Gee E oes 83 308 Exhaust OVSISI oos ap 3 284 92 35 4 399 S or ees 83 367 Extender Seat Belt SES 05 EXIGHOF DISHES ies uoce qe 303 40b 9 AR EE Ee 86 Fabric Cale T 384 Filler Location Fuel SEE 150 312 Filters Air Cleaner SE eee eee 361 Air SnelBoBIBP 5 2 ces opse 44g ace ee ees 238 364 Automatic Transaxle leen 380 Fisies Oil sasies oe REUS A Uh ER SE 360 397 Engine OI Disposal 22d etate cence ese 360 Plasp lO2 ES 222 44 sere cess bas HAAR H DAE 113 Flash rs sb 0656 66 He dREGE HHS EERE e hopes s 330 Hazard
130. and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move t
131. ant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Selection Of Coolant CAUTION Continued Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine taining Your Vehicle for further information coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the Adding Coolant specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine possible coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance Continued intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte
132. ap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
133. ar eee ee bs 4 304 397 Redtirements 6144448434 0400 24e4 bek 304 396 Junk CaRdGhy was weder we dpud Cau v 396 Fuel System L dukon essees sarei BAR Bert oe dodi 313 Fuel Flexible P 308 Edele eaen OER ER ER OPERATE 312 lg eaa oot EE EE PT 386 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 124 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap ases risia 312 314 353 Gasoline Clean Air 0000008 304 Gasoline Reformulated 304 N INDEX 433 Gauges Coolant Temperate 3 23 9 9 19 94 6 nee Ed 150 PUC 3x93 229 9 935 ROS eee pete aes apa 150 Odometer oues ums E RUEEQESSUPE TEE ESSE 154 T ROME carpages Peta echa S ess ages 154 Gear Select Lever Override lusu 345 i n PPP 252 General Information 17 905 General Maitena a woo aes peu e sp d wur 356 Glass ClGGHING D PE m 385 Gross Axle Weight Rating se 65 454 n 315 318 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 315 317 GVW EE 915 Hands Free Phone uconnect 95 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water su 66266546554 44h 299 Hazard Warning Flaslief s 22445444 rar ii 330 Head Koste sea sn AE PST S AR DE DE 104 Liesel soas REM ARE HE HER EER ORDE ed 392 Bui Kepliacement cu ues a dak HEG cer DAAN 992 CCAS ovacto4 nh eee SEER DEON 383 Lieb Bed 2 522999 9 9 3 a RE a ee N 113 163 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 113 OM ual WIPES iss eae a Os 0 6 eee oe ee 120 Passe 4246546 F84246444 HAD 4468456444 113
134. ard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area and have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield To allow
135. ark the vehicle on level ground 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the lever in PARK 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transmission 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80 F 27 C 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then remove dipstick and note the reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the filler dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and
136. as a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 421 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing y
137. as side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be tween you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING WARNING Continued e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags severe injuries in a collision The airbags work do not have any accessory items installed which with your seat belt to restrain you properly In will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably Occupant Restraint Controller ORC extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system instrument panel required for this vehicle Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof
138. at belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 022636662 Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly 022636663 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt 2 vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs ar
139. ation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil guality reguirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be im paired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Engine Air Cleaner Filter WARNING The air inductio
140. ations will enable lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion completely with clear water resistance built into your vehicle ous y e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu What Causes Corrosion lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove paint and protective coatings from your vehicle e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR The most common causes are Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never t e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation ie E aaa i d H scratch the paint 7 S SIDES graven Pec e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint N finish Salt in the air near seacoast localities me Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner such as steel wool or scouring powder which will e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible T
141. ats seat covers or portable dan EE DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 WARNING Continued e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Head Restraints Rear Seats The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be adjusted For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area the rear seatback can be folded forward Pull on the loops shown in the picture to fold down either or both seatbacks When returning the rear seat back to the upright position 3 be sure the seatback is latched 035107278 Folding Rear Seats 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The rear cargo area of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by
142. ay will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward
143. bag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer ser vice the airbag system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to ve
144. bed under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake Failure to perform the required maintenance items master cylinder and transmission and add as needed may result in damage to the vehicle e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Required Maintenance Intervals operation Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
145. by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to retum this feature to its previous setting NOTE If there is no key in the ignition switch pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Flash Lights With Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle b
146. by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON RUN or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially each time when unbuckling 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the
147. cians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 418 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 419 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation D
148. ction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual me I I aly WATES I8 PUEL MEAR PAMLOW WINDSHIELD WEA EXTERIOR BULB WPL TERME TENT FAILURE mm ma n E vm at zi i HE AR WeuDOVE WIPIDSHIE T1 MASTER LiH ru MTERMITTENT WIPER GELET N cH ITI crs L I WASHER FLUID LEVEL m p g we EMGIRE CIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALL PARK LIGMTE HEATEG E3 0 g WV BATTERY HEATED MIRADA id ele PANEL CHARGING LLLUMIMATION 2 X G CLOW FLAT POWER WEMCSHIELD WIPETI SIOE AREAS STEERING FLUE AND WAGHER E SRS dr RIRBRG aa MALFINCTION ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL WOOCATOM LIGHT E pu TEMPERATUME RESTRAINT SYSTEM D e H wd amp qat BEAR MRN Sea N VER AF AE BEAT Doom LOCH ZD e a a POMER ACTIVATE ul pe een EDT Verde LIFT xD wa vi ODO mm PAHI POG LIGHT HODO RELEASE RECHICULATION a VEMTILATIMG FAM WINDOW LOCF Qe c sd TE RELEASE REAR FOG LAMA aH LE TERTE DEFROST AND koas LX di BEAT DELI BL
149. current variance Zone number is dis played To change the Zone press and release the STEP button to increase the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold the RESET button for approximately 10 seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed 3 Release the RESET button then press and hold again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster E 14 F FM 101 1 10 041035180 Electronic Vehicle Information Center E
150. cuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED An optional ash receiver is available from your autho rized dealer and will fit in the center console front cupholder The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter that can be used with the power outlets Refer to Power Outlets in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders located in the center console for the front passengers Rear Seat Bottle Holder There are built in bottle holders located in both rear door trim panels 2E o Rear Bottle Holder WARNING If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 STORAGE Pull on the handle to open the glovebox Glovebox The glovebox storage compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel 035237035 Opened Glovebox
151. d Power Door Locks A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 021836670 Power Door Lock Switch Auto Door Lock If Equipped When enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your authorized dealer for programming 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Auto Unlock On Exit Auto Unlock On Exit Programming The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be power door locks if enabled or disabled as follows 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle abled Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the 4 The driver door is opened following procedure 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h 2 Cycle the ignitio
152. d Rear Seat Belts The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three point belts are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passen gers on sedans The center belt is mounted to the rear shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Au
153. d HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light proceed to Programming A Rolling Code System Programming A Rolling Code At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor It is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 2 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance
154. d by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 MPEG Sampling Fre PeR Playback of MP3 WMA Files Specification quency kHz p When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded 320 256 224 192 the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 160 128 112 96 contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more Layer 3 80 64 56 48 time to sta
155. damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec grated Power Module Fuse Box on the driver s side of onds before trying again the vehicle The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one After Starting hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine eo WARNING ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EGUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt quicker Starts im cold weather Connect tne cord toa electrical cord could cause electrocution standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a erounded three wire extension cord Remember to disconnect the engine block heater 250 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK CAUTION WARNING Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal idle speed If yo
156. desired level then release the button N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the Illuminated Entry system if equipped will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency RF noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 5 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 021432709 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the
157. di include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C Air F
158. displayed Press and hold the SELECT button once to clear the function currently displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display during this three second window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Compass Display The compass heading indicates the direction amp the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight COMPASS compass heading and the outside tempera Button ture NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually When the ve hicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will flash the CAL indicator until the compass is calibrated You may calibrate the compass by completing 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration reguires a level surfac
159. drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 286 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage th
160. during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an autho rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthor ized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes For the first three minutes the horn will sound intermittently and the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash Then th
161. dy Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove sal
162. e Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Location NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that reguire airbag occupant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection If a child from
163. e Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 293 WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Re
164. e 4b 380 Panc Glan oe SEERDE OR rreo 25 Parke Drake 229444 5403s eant Seok ee oes 262 Dassie Ont seque sees oe EER WERD dg P BAR 113 Personal eres x 4 dd ORDER RO ER 176 Pele pseu sinode pas eee et eee Hoge He DAM ek 82 Phone Cellular 221 22e EE Pe ROSE BEd ee 95 Phone Hands Free uconnect 95 Placard Tire and Loading Information 280 Power Door LOCKS ass SEERDE REELE RO DE SEED ol ling ora so woes 00 ER erer EEE AAR AR AE Ss 92 438 INDEX NEE Id Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 134 c C EE EET AI EK 96 lee ig sies dq eq E ee ee eee eons EN 261 262 PUNNOO lt a EES une phe bebe un d o e 131 unn 44 0 oes ses EE RA eee eb ea eta 34 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts DD Freparabom for Jacking sis iN EE enced es 45 ER 333 Pretensioners eat bel s cxusec yv enES Exe Segeeeesees 49 Programmable Electronic Features 176 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry iade ede 25 Radial Piy Imes 1 edendo dor d ER S I ie 287 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 9 2 Radio Operation dcr eae 9d PRA RR UE D EUR es 226 Radio Remote Coutols ea RR RE ess 224 Rear CUPDHOBISE 44 5444 4044562 DERIT ENT 138 Reds Seat Folding uuueeesRtreeucp ess 107 108 Rear Window Defroster SES SS SS 144 Rear Window Features ss ss Se 144 Rearview MIiTOTS souse sets Bas eee eo eS SS X3 91 Recorder Event Data 0 0000 70 Recreational TOWING sien
165. e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will con tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units In To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently
166. e CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES is asingle CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models
167. e Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Mix and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibil ity of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Window Fogging Interior fogging on the
168. e and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press and release the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass Yes displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button and the CAL indicator will quit flashing 5 Drive the vehicle slowly under 5 mph 8 km h completing one or more circles in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head Ing NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where t
169. e exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System 1 Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door lock switch one door must be open or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter doors can be open or closed and close all doors NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm NOTE e During the 16 second arming period if a door is opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 e Once armed the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim panel the trunk release button on the instrument panel and the HomeLink Ga
170. e for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is program mable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Auto Window Up If Equipped Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To cancel the Auto Up movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE ANTI PINCH PROTECTION e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING When the window is almost closed there is no anti pinch protection To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
171. e incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 11D41 126 AB Second Edition Printed in U S A
172. e lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the reguirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued N MAI
173. e lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly Jack Warning Label 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id NOTE The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning with two attachment points When the jack is partially them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the expanded the tension between the two attachment ground CAUTION points holds the jack handle in place Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3 3 There is a front and rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle 819b068d Removing Jack Handle From Jack WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 060533068 060533069 6 Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING CAUTION Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only
174. e of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects e Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on the RKE transmitter N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 020210511 Vehicle Key To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The Illuminated Entry system if equipped will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle
175. e radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback
176. e system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If t
177. e the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Infla tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then guickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB are d
178. e the trunk lid can be released by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel Trunk Release Button NOTE The shift lever must be in PARK for this switch to operate With the ignition switch in the ON RUN position the word deck will display in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the key out the word deck will display until the trunk is closed On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles the words Trunk Ajar will display N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke ll 022310660 Trunk Internal Emergency Release Trunk Internal Emergency Release As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply
179. e transmission fluid F temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on safely pull over and stop the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and 28 High Beam Indicator run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off ED This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer CAUTION ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause Display If Equipped severe transmission damage or transmission failure This display shows the EVIC messages when the appro priate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor WARNING mation Center EVIC for further information If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER CMTC illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle IF EQUIPPED in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to NOTE boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust e The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating elimi components and cause a fire nating the need to manually calibrate the compass 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler 9 gps Navigation Radio the NAV system wi
180. e using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Audio DRC If Eguipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the mov
181. e valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla Hon pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low N STARTING AND OPERATING 287 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi Hons are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased ti
182. e you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury N
183. eature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 030407271 030433073 I Power Mirror Control Mirror Directions To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand control to the center position to prevent accidentally in the direction you want the mirror to move moving a mirror 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Adjusting Side View Mirrors Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other objects Use your inside mirror when judging the size or dista
184. ed The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401 e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps descri
185. ed ee ep ees es 86 395 olippery Surfaces Driving ON 2s is su EERDER 258 Snow Chains Tire Chains 293 AO TICS eie ded arco d dard v eee da Ur ek ad 293 pare Hie rq 288 289 332 Specifications Mr 358 Speed Control Cruise Control 122 157 bpeedomeler A bas haan ORR AE HbR s 150 DIAN oo bes OE SR SR REID GE RR ED ee 246 Engine Pals to Siart sies 6406s ae Send e hes 247 Staring and OPE Gaga oa s iN oa RE EE 246 tarune Procedures asd yeahs eae dha BARE 246 Steering OWED 44444 4o0e8 66480440454 i Grins 261 262 Tit Colum 2242 Aa ESE REEDE SHE eens 121 Wheel Til 55252 492523239992 93222 92253 121 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 224 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound sie CONOIS e odo pop 9p fip see as 224 N INDEX 441 DIGTE a ee ee ee ee 139 391 are VODICI serra E EE 4 RD ARE R HE 237 bliek E 24 aa n 344 DU ROOI MP 191 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 55 ntiete Eng me ON so acceso ios PUR oe RR HA AE 360 WACHOMGCIC 2 23525 94 E RR EER ELS E Sa ens 154 TOUCHING T Vee desea ee Gene ee 395 Telescoping Steering Column 2 RE 121 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 291 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 150 330 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 75 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Theft System Security Alarm ii as sap des 17 Silt Steering CODE a asa saaa X RO wee ER 121 Time Dely HeadlgBE uu actes oy oe dere 112 Tire and Loading I
186. ed gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion 306 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id
187. ed on the outboard side of the seat raises and lowers it Total travel is 2 2 in 56 mm Manual Seat Height Adjustment Lever 030933075 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Reclining Seats The recliner control is on the side of the seat To recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then lean back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Seatback Adjustment 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is located on the outboard side of the driver s seatback Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat The hard seatb
188. eel 045033001 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Right Hand Switch Functions Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD i ration e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume Operatio P the t f th itch to listen to th t e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume EA de EA EG e Press the button in the center of the switch to change i Press th f the switch ither to li modes i e AM EM etc e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next and so forth listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button located in the center of the switch to P the button in th ter of th itch tot t EE a Mc Pu dub MM d change to the next preset that you have programmed the next preset that you have programmed 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the
189. either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Mus
190. el no matter what the speed STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow 055007576 1 Worn Tire this warning can result in sudden tire failure You ee could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death 292 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires eguiva lent to the originals in size guality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to th
191. en driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy stop and go traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 2 Fuel Door Reminder This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is i located on the left side of the vehicle 3 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 4 Speedometer Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to approximately 2 0 gal lons 7 6 Liters the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound NOTE This light will remain on until a minimum of appr
192. en t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 022636664 Positioning the Lap Belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle AR NING The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in an accident The belt forces allow the belt to retract fully won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced aft
193. en you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed wi
194. engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fic
195. enough to remove the tire WARNING 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the e To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift vehicle has been lowered provides maximum stability e To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel sharp edges covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 torque is 100 ft lbs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or h
196. ent LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Front Courtesy Reading Lamp 578 W5W Center Courtesy Reading Lamp 578 W5W Visor Vanity Lamp s sa ee ue Re bebe nn s A6220 Glove Box Lamp sss ras oot nde Rt drea A6220 Shift Indicator Lamp s sess ssia DEERE NE IKLE14140 Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 579 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Low Beam Headlamp a ieu eh RARR RE oa a H11 Migh Beam Headlamp io ses see s die EP o 9005 Front Park Tum Signal Side Marker Lamp 3757A Front EOS ai soos osse AE Be ote ed s H11 Front Side Marker Lamp ace sere gs t N dw WYSW Center High Mounted Stop CHMSL Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tail Stop EOD 233 ARE RR per DER ORDE LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Turn Signal Lamp qw eo des ee een Ge HER LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer backup Leti as sage oes oh BRA Gee eee 921 License aM sa egre ie cee gene OD WOW BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp 1 Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the headlamp MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 NOTE It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner 3 Rotate bulb and connector 1 4 turn and pull outward filter housing and position the totally integrated power from assembly module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp on the driver s side of the vehicle 2 Reach into engine compartment and from behind
197. ent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING e When working near the
198. er is vade itm ss 114 LOU Pel se E 25 eye OR OER ER 151 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 161 Map RODOS sa se Sou RR Ere d 9d HA RE 115 Oil Pressure SE SS ees 152 Dass osse VORME WED URE RD gba de 113 Seat Belt Reminder Ls 151 Security Alarm Theft Alarm i x reme msn 18 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 158 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 159 295 Traction Control 4 2x3 cs wec cd RR EYES 273 TORO ss eg ER RED a 86 112 158 395 ic c vmm 151 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 150 Loading Vehicle s sese Y dm ER DO ENE 915 916 Gapaeili s 244445540 es HAP Pad Aj dies d 316 436 INDEX NEE Id Locks Auto Unlock Child Protection Power Door Low Tire Pressure System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Lubrication Body Lumbar Support Maintenance Free Battery Maintenance Procedures Maintenance Schedule Maintenance General Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine Manual Service Map Reading Lights Master Cylinder Brakes 356 421 Methanol 4249565440658 Ue PESCE URS RAS 305 Mini Irip Computer se PROPRE RS RS 163 171 Ula ECT Poe en ee ae Cees Os ee es 8 91 Comipassy Temperature issie xo dome RE 92 Electric Powered 4222 2 wxnt 6 e055 x 92 Outside N ER EE OE FREE WR RES 94 Kei EN dace 2 998 Xx ZA ee Ed RS RE 91 iru Tr rM 95 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 295 MOPA
199. er an accident if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push ANCHORAGE button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 022636665 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN I
200. er part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best Continued your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The se
201. er the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location oy 5 LH RICS gages SPS A ROE Tett JTITCHERIWEETEEMVWIEILIISERV ER NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1 on the driver s side B Pillar 2 T125 70D15 3 420kPa 60PSI 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 281 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load
202. erature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected 045607559 e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as
203. esigned to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
204. ess the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you ru commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right controls are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wh
205. etrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reaso
206. ever allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Exp
207. evices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the
208. f the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 WARNING Continued Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost
209. fied to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC they are located above e the side windows The trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB to provide enhanced pro e tection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim e but they will open during airbag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following a
210. form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between t
211. formation Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Control NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Fog Lights If Eduipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the pa
212. formation Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Operat ing for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in in creased yaw or vehicle instability A negative trailer tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability Negative trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat and potentially become disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 323 WARNING WARNING Continued Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these e Safety chains must always be used between your guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing
213. g PIU 21 224 29 399 9 eee ERR 379 380 398 Fiber penance casa ee reas ES ETE GES 380 Fluid and Filter Changes 380 Fluid Level Check lt 2s EE be DEER 6 379 380 bet died de AAS AA ARE RA AS OF 291 Reset Mode iuuenem do SEE beeen Ee cows 255 Selection Of Lubricant less 398 DIIS s s guure 9s Ges Peri eES oud een sas 252 Automatic Transmission dino C oe Shee oe ee bo ae 377 Dpecial Additives ies Hh 4G SH SHEERS ERGO 378 Autostick eee 256 B Pillar Location SS SS SS 0a 280 DITE 222422939 4 2 007224 4 8d 4 DA EED SE 361 J rip OIdEBUB 2 ot tees N dob boe d sob od IE 30 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 IOCIHON 64 4 a s4 MERE heed RE AR Se REE 361 Belts Seat asses ob ene hea ee eee EROR 84 Body Mechanism Lubrication 365 Brake Assist Syste issus 444 ROSE DEE PS 268 Drake SysSlEM P EE ER EE TE 379 Anti Lock ABS dais vis died DR eed ER oe 265 Plaid Check nua seek BROOS ERA 375 398 Master Cylinder aca sm nas DREK ee ox 375 PARKIDE ia ske en ERAS AU ore OR ED 8 ars 262 Magne ie xs e wd vus ROOS DE ace Edu 152 Drake LAKINE cauia edendi Sara d e ee borde as 262 Brake Transmission Interlock 202 DIBROS Sone Aeeag baw Sea OLD ERA DER BARE 3 5 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 82 Bulb Replacement ss 2944992 ii rsi 992 BUIDS LACK PC R 86 392 Calibration COMpPass x ese dre sos mE Ys 167 174 Capacities An
214. ght Out with a single chime 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Remote Keyless Entry Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not In PARK Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in Motion Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Headlights On Key In Ignition Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted Trunk ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled System fault Oil Change Required with a single chime ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting and Operat n ing Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting and Operating EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 Oil Change Required If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the
215. h from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 CAUTION If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF away and jam the player mechanism convertible or soft top models if equipped RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button ra a second CD if one is already loaded Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning other side is a CD should not be used and they of the current selection or return to the beginning of the can cause damage to the player previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK EJECT Button Ejecting a CD button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the EJECT button to eject the CD CD and MP3 modes TIME Button P
216. h the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlights Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press the SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 seconds appears Headlights With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press the SELECT button until Off 45 sec
217. hat level automati 045607537 Cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment 045607534 Automatic Temperature Control 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance While operating in AUTO the system will not auto matically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield The defrost mode m
218. he cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider d t hields behind each wheel e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges EQ C E of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on and open scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective
219. he range markings on the dipstick Either the range mark ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of 7 the range marking 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Engine Oil Selection CAUTION For best performance and maximum protection under all Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine types of operating conditions the manufacturer recom will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the pressure and an increase in oil temperature This requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 could damage your engine American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your
220. he child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child s back is against the seatback then the child should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraints e All passenger seating positions contain automatic locking retractors However any seat belt system will s Cuddenwhoac SE HT loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle wher
221. he compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings V RE 77 040506040 v 71819 Compass Variance Map eh IS 6 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Leave the shift lever in PARK 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press and release the DOWN button until Compass Variance and the current Variance Value displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to increment the Variance Value by one one button press per update until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map NOTE The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 back to 1 The Default Variance is Zone 8 5 Press and release the MENU button to exit Press the DOWN button if you wish to calibrate the compass manually Refer to Manual Compass Calibration 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Press and release the DOWN button to display the following programmable features Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the SELECT but
222. he dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for approximately three seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not
223. he vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction ESC Off Switch To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NS TA TING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING In the Partial ESC mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail able NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC on again by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at s
224. her direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone
225. hicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds ru The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn
226. hicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces requi
227. hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 022636679 Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE These airbags are certi
228. hrough the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O 045607577 OFF position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off 045607574 position Manual Temperature Control The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 045607540 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is
229. ic Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER
230. ice lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE
231. icle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the
232. icle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J _1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 64 000 miles 104 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 56 000 miles 91 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cr
233. ie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory NE 9 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 EM and 12 Satellite if eguipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a correspo
234. ignition switch to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal rmm 5 Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the hole at the front of the cupholder and push and hold the override release lever forward 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the cupholder liner 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS Flat Tow If transmission is operable e Trans in NEUTRAL e 25 mph 40 km h max speed Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow e 15 mi 24 km max distance prot OK Flatbed o AIL BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN equipment designed for the purpose following equip position not the ACC position ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 CAUTION e Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach t
235. ilter while the blower is Operating or personal injury may result The A C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door 3 Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box This is done by grasping the dampener connector on the outside of the box and the end of the connector pin on the inside of the box with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand Once disconnected the dampener will retract under neath the instrument panel if you release it 4 Pivot the glove box downward 5 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 A C Air Filter Replacement 6 Remove the A C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 7 Install the A C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often 8 Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box Bo
236. ine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessiv
237. ing REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per
238. ing copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming e Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position e Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the indicator light in view e Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter but ton until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code System e Press and hold the just traine
239. inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position and you must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start Four Speed Transmission turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure A STARTING AND OPERATING 247 For vehicles equipped with Tip Start Six Speed Trans mission turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage auto matically when the engi
240. ion sg Rek SEE G2 134 O Driver s Side Sunglass Holder W Electrical Power Outlets 134 Ga EE ET Sod ll Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver BE iS MEd 44 2 4 ups oq MOS DERS RR 140 IE IS ed as eie oo DERE EE a Di 138 W Console Features Re Ene EE ems 142 Mi olders RE meet ee ED as 138 H Dial Storage DINS sa is ane d cea ao Sd pr 143 El Rear Seat Bottle Holder ease a em PRE 138 W Rear Window Features sesse see 144 EE ae AE os be ee oe eee REKE 139 O Rear Window Defroster 144 BIER ev AA OAR oe BY re TE 139 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming f
241. irbag system components e e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Airbag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Airbag Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Advanced Front Airbag Features WARNING The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output e No objects should be placed over or near the appropriate to the severity and type of collision as airbag on the instrument panel because any such determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a which may receive information from the front impact collision severe enough to cause the airbag to sensors inflate Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may dam age the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the
242. is the preferred towing method However if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available wheel lift towing equip ment may be used Rear towing with the front wheels on the ground is not allowed as transmission damage will occur If rear towing is the only alternative the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transmission Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Engine Compartment 2 4L 351 W Maintenance Procedures 356 N Engine Compartment 3 6L 952 BB 91 MC 357 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 353 siese Ii ol esr wis EE eS 360 H Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 353 O Pagine Air Cleaner Filter os lt s rox RR RR 361 Mi Emissions Inspection And Maintenance E Maintenance Free Battery issues Ee SR RE LIOBPOUS si wag eed eee HER e ee care ad 354 EU Condiioner Maintenance W Replacement Parts ss ES Se 355 5 A C Air Filter If Equipped 364 W Dealer Service AE RE EE EE EE 355 2 Body Lubrication 0000ee ee 365 o Windshield Wiper Blades 366 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M H Adding Washer Fluid o Exhaust System ACooling Systemi eus poem TR errire esri HEESE oos o charts WO Rad oye
243. is Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission 256 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id In the event that the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift into PARK 3 Turn the ignition OFF and restart the engine 4 Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position below the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display i
244. is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Filler Cap Message If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 315 VEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification
245. is exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switc
246. isc at Once option before writing to the disc NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 Media Center 130 RES RSC 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control tur
247. label attached to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision 316 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it
248. le is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If reguired mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors B Inside Day Night Mirror o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped O Power Mirrors o Adjusting Side View Mirro
249. le on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Eguipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country cod
250. lect the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with th
251. ll continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have a collision Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 door openers motorized gates lighting or home security NOTE Homelink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu sy
252. ll diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in A STARTING AND OPERATING 277 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 278 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side
253. ll provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field The Compass Mini Irip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver interactive dis play displays information on outside temperature com pass direction and trip information NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Control Buttons 040834255 Compass Mini Trip Control Buttons STEP Button Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to scroll through sub menus i e Temperature Trip Func tions Odometer Trip A Trip B NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 RESET Button To reset the display shown turn the ignition switch to the ON position then press and hold the RESET button The following displays can be reset or changed e Compass Temperature e Trip A e Trip B Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the STEP button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A si
254. locked in PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position ACC ON or START engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Four Speed Six Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range 051010709 Shift Lever NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 253 When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the WARNING Continued PARK position first a
255. lure to follow this procedure could result in per sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end
256. may result in longer disc loading times NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 MPEG 1 Audio 160 128 112 96 48 44 1 32 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 bos a 24 22 05 16 96 80 64 56 48 P 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Layer 3 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following
257. mmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to retum this feature to its previous setting NOTE If there is no key in the ignition switch pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped The RKE remotely lowers both driver and passenger front windows simultaneously Lowering the front win dows using the RKE is a two step operation 1 Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once 2 Press the UNLOCK button a second time and hold the button until the windows lower completely or the win dows drop to the
258. n Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding
259. n switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child 041032963 Protection Door Lock system Child Protection Door Lock Location 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision The Child Protection Door Locks are located inside the rear edge of the door Insert the tip of the ignition key or similar flat bladed object into the lock and rotate approxi mately one quarter turn to the lock or unlock position as indicated by the stamped icons 021836674 Child Lock Control Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up UNLOCKED position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches The control on
260. n system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to _Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e
261. n the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator A STARTING AND OPERATING 257 NOTE In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left AutoStick is deactivated when the shift lever is shifted from the AutoStick position into the DRIVE position General Information You can start out from a stop in any gear except sixth The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed If a ratio other than first gear is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transmission control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions To select second gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop tap the shift lever to the right once Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is engaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged If a downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine The transmission will stay in the manually selected ratio If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off If the system detects a problem
262. n the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur 262 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as a
263. nce of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing the Features of Your Vehicle for further information N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights 030433074 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a hands free system that allows you to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in your mobile phone Press the Uconnect Phone button e on the radio or steering wheel controls if equipped and follow the instructions to pair the mobile phone Refer to Uconnect M Phone in the Uconnect M User Manual located on the DVD for further details VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Commands can be initiated by pressing the VR button vn located on the radio or steering wheel controls if equipped
264. nce the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler Uconnect gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differ ences and provide the most accurate compass heading 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE 1 e A good calibration reguires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc 3 e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the center of the instrument panel This is where the compass sensor is located 4 Aa L 9 6 Compass Variance Map 7 8 9 b os o4a NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 To Set The Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the RESET button on the steering wheel for approximately ten seconds until the
265. nction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 4j D 031633077 Tilt Telescoping Steering Wheel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle
266. nd then apply the parking brake e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise number of reasons A child or others could be the load on the transmission locking mechanism may seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As ignition key in the ignition switch A child could an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the operate power windows other controls or move curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an the vehicle uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage REVERSE Continued This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop 254 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTR
267. nding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio displ
268. ndows other controls or move the vehicle If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 265 ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces WARNING e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni ies
269. ne coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped During sustained high speed driving or trailer tow up long grades on a hot day the engine oil temperature may become too hot If this happens the HOTOIL message flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph 85 km h until the engine oil temperature is reduced NOTE The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of 53 mph 85 km h You may of course reduce your vehicle speed further if needed 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The Jack Location vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor could be crushed Never put any part of your body in the trunk under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine
270. ne is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec onds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 7 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 248 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Without Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the
271. nformation Placard 280 Tire Identification Number TIN 278 Tue MIB 2123929 EF ea oh oe GIE ee ee 274 Tue Satety IoiotmatiOn e os ie EER 604 cen rt 274 jn Pr 86 284 423 Aging Lie ol Tires canes ao eee sh Cr 29 Ad esse sis dee EO MEE PEE Ee a dob a 284 oru P 293 C iss ea eee es aoe see eee a 332 Compact OPale sus ane RR Shee SERE hee 288 General Informati n nace va an de aoe ae ey 284 EHC POI oe was ira ic ae owes HA DE 287 Inrianon Pressures seuri oaa SR EK oe PERSE 285 Ee si TE EE EE OE EE ET 332 Liesel dies wvio d seas cee een Ha Rae aos 291 Load apatie vd RE O3 bagasse 280 281 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 295 Pressure Warning Light 159 Quality GIOI 4 4444555 bake PRETI DP 423 Raat 24405455685 EP HAS RU REA E RA SE Replacement 442 INDEX NEE Id Rolle soete Ek 655645454 4 at oa T 294 cio se 2 tsi pens heres DR REDE EE 274 284 7 C 276 HOW Tikes P 293 pare Tie Vo dare AAR 8 RE ERG DA ae 332 PIEKE Dm 290 Iread Wear DOR DOES xoa mq HE 2655 6 etua 29 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 321 llo dd RE ROEI ONE FOTO E 316 Disabled Vehicle si ao sd tiorem Peres 346 GUNG vee me eet Gore oe Ee ee Se ee 320 Recreational ss saris ak Ed E IUE PORE EERS EK 327 AUO as oat ea ESE NE SEE eee 320 DAC 229459 339 3 99 e a 258 Traner TONE C RA HE DE ERAS oy es 316 Cooling System Tips caos s t454445 084 HER es 327 HINES
272. ns Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Pu
273. ns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your ve
274. nt Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoul d
275. nt wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Apply the parking brake Start the engine 3 4 5 Release the clutch pedal 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESC Off switch four times within 20 sec onds The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is dis abled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 EVIC Equipped Vehicles HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equipped vehicle If you wish to turn off the HSA feature refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help
276. ntenance 226 H Notes On Playing MP3 Files 215 W Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 226 4 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 218 W Climate Controls aae aw aecdtesseet 226 G Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 218 O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 227 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio o Automatic Temperature Control ATC idee iese EE ER stap mis ER 219 K Eetipped ss aie auo eae qoa ROND 251 ll Steering Wheel Audio Controls DOpetatine Tips suse oq once EER DU RR a 237 Hi diipped urbes us Rai qu Pu ES dde s 224 O Right Hand Switch Functions 229 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES WE 0 0 Em i x yos b fr E om DE NK C MED 1 Air Outlet 5 Beverage Can Cooler Bin 9 Power Outlet 2 Side Window Demister Outlet 6 Glove Compartment 10 Climate Controls 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 11 Trunk Release Button 4 Radio 8 Hazard Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040335766 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera ture wh
277. ntici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 263 The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely m N n9m ono Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the pa
278. ntly broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Rock Soft Rek 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next freguency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 window Se
279. o fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restrain
280. o front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON position not the LOCK or ACC positions The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the following condi tions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 24 km e The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed truck towing dolly or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN id CAUTION Towing faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km with front wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission Such dam age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position Flatbed towing
281. o start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION e Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com patible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in ve hicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is
282. of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure aft
283. of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN id FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Tum your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and
284. of the vehicle for any reason Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic Continued 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags and front seat belt pretensioners as reguired depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicat
285. offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www Siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this scree
286. old placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 302 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel ho
287. on press the button a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window defroster only when the engine is operating window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS N Instrument Panel Features 148 W Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC M Instrument Cluster 00 149 If Equipped 6 eee eee eee eee W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 150 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays ii ARE RR EE ane ee eee ies HS 169 ll Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC If Equipped sess 163 9 Oil Change Required If Equipped 171 PC OMG BUHONS uoce px puma E I ae causa 164 DO Trip Functions ee esse ee EE Ee eee 171 O0 Compass Temperature Display 165 O Compass Display 050 173 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 176 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed ll Media
288. one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys by performing the following proce dure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed
289. opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Fro
290. or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS N STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC An
291. or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cleaning Center Console Cupholders Removal Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward Cleaning Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mi
292. ors of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup e e Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t hav
293. our payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 422 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www
294. owing conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level and e RKE PANIC button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle theft alarm not active 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious e Remote Start Aborted System Fault injury or death when inhaled The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to the ON RUN position away from children Operation of the Remote Start To Enter Remote Start Mode System windows door locks or other controls Press and release the REMOTE START button could cause serious injury or death 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle Remote Start
295. oximately 3 0 gallons of fuel is added 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster If the Charging System Light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See your local authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 7 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information es ry 8 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains
296. peeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds md when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop 3swai Y when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver 054903773 that caused the ESC activation U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load ed dards Code TIN R The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure eoe Electronic Stability Control ESC is off 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Tempera
297. per pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
298. placing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires satisfy this require ment can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be 294 STARTING AND OPERATING poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and
299. pped J Anti Lock Brakes N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 CAUTION VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than e When installing the Totally Integrated Power 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is battery properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Totally Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will indicates a problem in the circuit that must be possibility of compressor damage when the system is corrected started again 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacem
300. products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner
301. properly NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of KO an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic conve
302. r s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Fluid Level Check 2 4L Engine Use the following procedure to check the automatic transmission fluid level properly 1 P
303. r lock cylinder which is located in the driver s door You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward For door lock lubrication refer to Mainte nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the Vehicle Security Light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key t
304. radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at anytime the igni tion switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine cool
305. rage Door Opener if equipped To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON START position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If the alarm was triggered but the warning signals have timed out the park and taillights flash three times instead of the normal twice and the horn will chirp three
306. re condition When this condition occurs the HOTOIL message will be displayed in the odom eter along with a chime NOTE When this message is displayed bring the vehicle to a stop and idle the engine in park until the message clears Raising the idle of the engine slightly will help speed up the cooling gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system or the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer display area If this occurs 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn off the gASCAP message Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each
307. re pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be reguired for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original eguipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs 288 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Spare Tire Matching Original Eduipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped The spare tire of your vehicle is eguivalent in look and function as the original eguipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in Tire Rotation Recommendations in
308. re that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants And Small Children Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorag
309. re the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a trip odom eter display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets ap proximately two seconds Refer to Trip Odometer But ton for additional information NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the odometer will display the following messages doos ip Be RR ESRA DA or Ed Door Ajar onn P eo SE ER ee ED RR OO an De Trunk Ajar LOW IUE save Rho REESE E Low Tire Pressure CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required pASCAD oie xd heb ake RE Fuel Cap Fault HOTOIL 22 22 Transmission Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe Threshold NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then all warnings including Low Tire Door Ajar and Trunk Ajar will only display in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for spe cific messages LoW TirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles HOTOIL When this message is displayed there is a transmission over temperatu
310. reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system to Partial OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Elec tronic Brake Control in Starting and Operating for further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener moved out of the PARK position you can use the ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever even failure of the axle and tires A tire could WARNING 1 Firmly apply the parking brake explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for 2 Remove the cupholder liner longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 3 Turn the
311. ress Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if so eguipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
312. ress this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are
313. rking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may 264 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The WARNING Continued parking brake should always be applied whenever the e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged driver is not in the vehicle before driving failure to do so can lead to brake WARNING failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for 4 eel P 5 ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or the parking brake Always apply the parking injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to movement and possible injury or damage roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving CAUTION unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power wi
314. rking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 031407550 Front Fog Light Control NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headligh
315. roadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Foreign Language Language Information Inform NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between P playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are availab
316. ront of the rear axle position should not be used as a play area by Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or children when the vehicle is in motion They could behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to be seriously injured in a collision Children Way should be seated and using the proper restraint Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the system 2 seatback This could impair visibility or become a dan To help protect against personal injury passengers gerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts e The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONSOLE FEATURES The center console is located between the front driver and passenger seats The center console armrest slides forward from design position to provide added user comfort The center console can be used for storage and is also eguipped with an electrical power outlet Refer to Power Outlets in Understanding The Feature Of Your Vehicle for further information 4 f 4 j A Center Console Dual
317. rs o Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature D Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped E Uconnect Phone If Equipped A 92 92 94 94 94 95 ll Voice Command If Equipped 95 hr RE a OE OE TEERDE 95 D Power Seats If Equipped 96 o Heated Seats If Equipped 98 O Manual Front Seat Adjustments 100 O Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster IP ECUIDIBO uae sans RAAR DORS poet es 100 O RCCHIING ed mama RARR ER ER ERE nd 101 BG Lumbar Support If Equipped 102 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M o Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 103 0 Head es HE ou Gi se qe v o merei RI 104 PLPOIGING Rear Seal uus ute se ee eee he Ra 107 oO Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest 108 W To Open And Close The Hood 109 EE ii ng ou a ee ee eS 111 LH Multifunction Lever siese Be x SEE 111 o Headlights And Parking Lights 111 D Automatic Headlights If Equipped 112 o Headlight Time Delay 5 ees 112 Hi Dei Steals D 112 O Lane El me Sis 4 da Se viue SEE DE pa 113 o High Low Beam Switch 22eiackeessu aes 113 O Flash lo Pass 3442545444 su oee sane eos 113 UH Fog Lights If Equipped 114 B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 114 O Lights On Reminder as aca eue sr RARR 114 O Instrument Panel Dimmer 115 o Map Reading
318. rt playing the MP3 WMA files MPEG 2 Audio 160 128 144 112 Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be Layer 3 22 22 09 16 96 80 64 56 48 ayer Bich Biche Mate affected by the following mm S hu op ing e Bit Rate kbps e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than pecification guency kHz CD R media 48 64 96 128 160 eee ane 192 VBR e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not e Number of files and folders Loading times will supported by the radios increase with more files and folders Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended supported to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in seguence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO
319. rter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 26 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light If Equipped This light monitors the ABS This light will ies come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for ap proximately three seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required however the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the on position but do not start the vehicle The light should come on If the light does not come on have the system inspected by an authorized dealer 27 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped This light indicates that th
320. s Tires on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carry e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact ing capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and spare tre GAWR limits e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or ating for proper tire inflation procedures vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible e Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres personal injury sures before trailer usage NS TA TING AND OPERATING 325 WARNING e An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of ma 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance
321. s a quos EE ROL DES DR DR 20 Keyless Entry System Sedan 20 KEYS TUTTI 12 Knee Bolster 242440000 Sender Erw dore epee SR EA 55 Lane Change and Turn Signals 158 395 Lane C honos ASSIST uoo v ewe doas dea ae yo Fo 113 Lap Shoulder Belis ies EER EED x ERE SE Ys 41 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 77 LACIOS asie pa erraria BEE Rae EN NE RR ee 86 FIOOG eo 685440495655 ee eos RE ARE HE 109 Lead Free Gasoline 24006052 saepe MR RR RE 304 Leaks Fluid web oe oe EGO os ee bo ee BE 86 fe OR NCS 224 299 99 9 99 9 2 99 eae HE Sobre p 291 EIS DE DUILS sparri een ewes oo we ed dde 86 392 Ibis Dc OE TT OER OK 86 111 DAG x3 ote eee ea d WU 65 70 84 151 onc P D P 395 Brake Assist Ware sins SEE ee Sag e e dera 279 Blake Warning 5444446 hw ea deh iiad SR 152 bull RODIAGOPHE DE o e oo us vos v Poe d went 392 Dastime KUNDING 4e seer r cord ae 8 114 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 273 Engine Temperature Warning e144 ke ske nn I PICHON Au Cr HEK oe EK eee E ee 86 DOS TEE AE IG OE PNIS 114 159 394 Heade ht WIEL areas pk Sa Gham odes RO 111 Heade DiS 2 4t qc Pond cd 93 23 in REG nd 111 Headlights On With Wipers 120 Liesl Beant Indicator eae Ea o0e4 4544 DE YS 163 Illturunaled BD osse ene 46 BEA GE DE 20 N INDEX 435 Instrument Cluster less 111 MICO 442464046 Rees PRU BS US DERE uod E 115 hal eec m 396 Lights On Remind
322. s not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside condi tions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi Level Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor Mix or Defrost modes If the Recirculation button is depressed while in any of these modes the LED indicator will flash several times then go out Recirculation will be dis abled automatically is these modes are selected The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch i
323. s of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NS TA TING AND OPERATING 299 NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON and a LOW TIRE message will be dis played for a minimum of five seconds 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the
324. s section please consult your dealer to for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Lo
325. s than 10 mph 16 km h interval There are five delay settings which allow youto delay times will be doubled 031508788 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 apania To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer WARNING control lever toward you and hold it for as long as Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield washer spray is desired could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mist Feature Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate 031508789 Mist Control Headlights With Wipers Feature Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifu
326. s turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Con ditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler tempera tures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures T 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation If Equipped The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain t
327. sary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter JJ Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Inspect and replace PCV Valve if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km O C O O O L L LL M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 104 000 Miles
328. seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system e e vice meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear Ai 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be eguipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the str
329. sh the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with th
330. sition Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park ZpQ lights or headlights are turned on 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con 5 trol system ESC has been turned off by the OFF driver 20 Turn Signal Indicators The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever 21 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed The light will stop flashing when the vehicle is disarmed 22 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activationl Malfunction Indicator Light If Eguipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC
331. smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or Mix mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or Mix mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and th
332. ss audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN MPEG Sampling Fre guency kHz Bit Rate kbps 920 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 MEG Audio 24 22 08 16 96 80 64 56 48 y 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 Layer 3 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the D
333. stems The Homel ink unit operates off your vehicle s rity Alarm is active battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner WARNING or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink e Your motorized door or gate will open and close channels while you are training the universal transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Continued 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is be
334. straint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode for further informa tion A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoul der and lap belt on the child restraint The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button and allow the webbing to retract into the retractor N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restr
335. t Con troller System serviced as well NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Air
336. t equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib of Occupant 3 160 Ibs Occupaffi amp 100 Ibs 865 Ibs U 70 BEE 195 Ibs Pu ama ee
337. t or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an a
338. tance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transaxle in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engi
339. tate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 24 000 miles 39 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your veh
340. techauthority com NN FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering h
341. the lamp assembly and grasp the connector CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN 4 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb Fog Lamps 1 Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is limited 2 Turn the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield 3 Rotate the bulb and connector 4 turn counterclock wise 4 Pull the bulb off of connector and replace with a new one 5 If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the 6 Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the clockwise 1 4 turn to secure bulb with rubbing alcohol MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Backup Lamps 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly outward pushing 1 Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner aen ey the studs from inside to disengage the lamp behind the tail lamp 2 Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp housing 073310827 4 Twist and remove socket from lamp 073310823 5 Remove bulb from socket and replace 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M License Plate Lamp 2 Gently pry the lamp assembly loose 1 Remove two retaining scre
342. the driver s door has up down switches that give you fingertip control of all four power win OWS 021936671 AUTO Power Window Switch There is a single window control on the front and rear passenger s door trim panel which operates the front and rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN or ACC position and when the accessory delay feature is active THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Window Down If Equipped The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto Down feature These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain activ
343. the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illumi nates you must increase the tire pressure to the recom mended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion 296 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa
344. ti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is 268 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id spinning faster than the other the system will apply the reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning deactivated This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability WARNING Control ESC in this section of this manua e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys Brake Assist System BAS ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking braking efficiency
345. tic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than io any air outside or A C on or olf Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable A C on or off 81412736 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temp
346. tic Transaxle 379 380 ERDE ane eh nays OG VR EER ORE DERE 357 Power S ISOLE ase RYE PERS EE qu E EIS 262 Disabled Vehicle Towing use RE REED R 346 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 373 E COU ER EE RE SE EE ENE 360 Door Locks Automatic een 91 Door Opener Ga 46 kek se prt DRS RE 124 430 INDEX NEE Id Driving On SHppery SUrfdceS sa ea rad ethic ee N 258 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water og sooo obras 259 sou P 308 Electric Rear Window Defrost 144 Electric Remote Mirrors usu oe e oes 92 Electrical Power Outlets issie were Ere de dees 134 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 122 Electronic Stability Control ESC sms 271 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 168 Emergency Tronk Release v uem APE thee aris 39 Emergency In Case of A rm 332 Jomp SIEHE escas BE ven AA oa HEG ARE 339 TOWING 2253864 6 093 35 9 ee ee EE SE RE 346 Emission Control System Maintenance 354 HUS exacesoo23 5654 ee eben E49 RS USES 351 Air Cleaner iese RE RE ceace 361 block Heater accus uude MASS OUER RD vows 249 Break In Recommendations 82 Checking Om Level s o op aeg uito ee ek ee 357 Compaen eus e one acne dui HOP es ees 352 Compartment Identification us essa E Es 352 Coolant Antifreeze 970 997 Sov D C 370 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 83 308 Fails to S
347. tifreeze Engine Coolant 20 Capacities Fluid 428 INDEX NEE Id Caps Filler POCI 912 Oil TEI lie jas oos bee eee ques PAD ES 951 959 Power SEE sn dick ARE SUPR OR S sex 262 Radiator Coolant Pressure 372 Rat ro TP 381 Carbon Monoxide Warning 83 308 Cargo Vehicle Loading 2446546652556 Er 140 Cargo mend Eties sis sr uev xag a HAARD v 140 Cargo Compartment sr wi au eg a do or daaa oen 140 Curso Load LIOO ue v3 ario aere Ryo GOED uos 140 Cellular Phone ia ESE beh EE E ES ERA 95 226 Chains Tire s lt 4 0c i ane dase ee et EER ES 293 Changing A Flat Tire va uon 3 4x ER RE ER es 332 Clean Wie OZINE DEDE 276 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 354 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 83 CHECKS ale EES ERA oe 83 Child Restraint 244 66544 e464 aut Die 71 73 77 80 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 75 17 Child le LOCKS PUE 33 Citar Ligier errre ie een hee eee eee im eti 138 Clean Air Gasoline SEE SEE 304 Cleaning Wheels nape EER OE OE SON TEE 383 Windshield Wiper Blades 366 Climate Control cue davies eee dues Gon Kees 226 de 4564 20 RE SEG bre OE EES eS 180 200 209 Coin Holder x sau 25 bear WEG Purse vera ee d 142 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 226 Compact Spare We ox eas REED Hek EP s 288 COMPASS OER P 33 Rug EL Y bs 163 167 173 Compass
348. time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 4 For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 15 Cruise Indicator If Eguipped CRUISE Tris indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON 16 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Single Trip Odometer Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to trip odometer The word Trip displays to show that the odometer is in Trip Mode Press and release the button again to change the display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first set the display to Trip Mode Then push and hold the button approximately two seconds until the display resets to 0 miles km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the
349. times when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EGUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors this feature is only available if you have RKE or if you open a door This feature also turns on the approach lighting if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds if the doors are closed They will fade to off immediately when the doors are closed and the ignition switch is moved out of the OFF LOCK position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console lights do not turn off in 30 seconds if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the dimmer control is in the extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk lower both front windows if equipped or activate the Panic Alarm from distances approximately 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE e The lin
350. tive plastic half 022607494 gt P AHR In Reset Position e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver to fasten their seatbelt This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver seatbelt is fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the driver seatbelt is fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the driver seatbelt is fastened The driver should instruct all 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id other occupants to fasten their seatbelts If the driver seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illuminate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled
351. tomatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Supplemental
352. ton on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then within 15 minutes insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock knob on each door trim panel upward e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle 021836669 Manual Lock Knob CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattende
353. ton while in this display selects English Spanish French German Italian or Dutch de pending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language Auto Unlock on Exit When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position all doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened To make your selection press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selec tion press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Sound Horn with Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked wit
354. ts are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Map Reading Interior Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror Each light can be turned on by pressing the barrel Press the barrel a second time to turn the light off Both of these lights can swivel so that the light can be aimed at a specific spot if desired The lights 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically Interior lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is tumed fully upward past the second detent 031433076 Interior Dome Lamp There is a second light located midway back in the headliner To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX The wipers and washers are operated by a switch SZ on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
355. ture Grades OFF NS TA TING AND OPERATING 275 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e T Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 276 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overa
356. ur foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children un attended inside a vehicle Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock Systems These systems prevent the key fob from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK They also prevent shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is out of the LOCK position and the brake pedal is applied Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position Once the key is removed the shift lever is
357. urns due to the increased surface temperature of to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will the seat turn OFF automatically a maximum of 45 minutes WAITING CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Front Seat Adjustments The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat to the desired position After releasing the adjusting bar apply forward and rearward body pressure to be sure the seat is latched t a Manual Seat Adjusting Bar WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster If Equipped A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort for petite as well as tall drivers A lever with a ratcheting mechanism locat
358. usings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the CHECK TPM SYSTEM mes sage is then followed with a graphic display with pres sure values still shown This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message is displayed NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the Tire Pressure NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 303 Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then displa
359. ust be manually se lected to clear the windshield and side glass NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation tum the knob to AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation How Blower Control The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point outside or recirculated Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Automatic Automatic Automa
360. ut and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty EE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO WARNING AREA
361. uthorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other appar
362. vate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 With a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 270 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL HSA Off Non EVIC Equipped Vehicles If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel fro
363. ws holding the light lens in 3 Pull bulb from socket replace and reattach the lamp place assembly with the two retaining screws FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate NN All Engines Except 2 4L PZEV 16 9 Gallons 64 Liters 2 4L PZEV Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Engine Oil with Filter i 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 4 Liters 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified 5 6 Liters Cooling System OS 2 4L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent die 3 6L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 11 6 Quarts It Liters Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy Engine Coolant brd Ore anic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 2 4L Engine Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 2 4L Engi t iius ugs he Ep ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 in
364. xture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liguid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth Installation Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM The TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover Refer to the graphic below for FUSES TIPM location 9p 072710826 Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Mini Fuse Description ee Description Power Top Mod Ignition Off NUM ule If Equipped ides Draw IOD 20 Amp Yel EHE Sense 2 AWD Module 9 low Battery Feed Center High 40 Amp Power Seats If 10 Amp Red Mounted Stop con pole doe En Light CHMSL id oa Brake Switch Equipped 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Instrument 20 Amp Yel Trailer Tow 10 i i pes dud Mis low If Equipped dl pe s Interior Lights Power Mirror Gelectable P 10 Amp Red Switch Climate ibm 11 Outlet Inside Controls Blue Ienition Off Center Arm Rest gnition Green low Sense 1 388 MAINT
365. y pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE If there is no key in the ignition switch pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with EVIC For details refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal Sound Horn With Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Progra
366. y and or prevent the engine from starting 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Im proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 2 11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 034636797 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers va
367. y dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 304 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses KR5518002015B 2671 5180015B United States 04 E AAS OAAR Aes Wee ke FUEL REGUIREMENT
368. ydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 426 INDEX NEE Id Deu Your Drakes ss duos ERAS RPO RE ESE ER EN 262 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 265 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 3 1 dens EU 20 2307 ax peor RE SUP ACE on end 212 Adding Washer Fluid ssc ed acer ehm a ois 367 Addiuves Tael arre CR P REUS pUR Ei uoa rriki 306 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 361 Air Conditioner Maintenance
369. ystem is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted restraint To lower the head restraint press the push forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to button located at the base of the head restraint and push the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the downward on the head restraint head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head dem 030907490 Push Button 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information y 4 030907533 WARNING Active Head Restraint Tilted e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as co

2011 Dodge Avenger Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents